Canon | EOS 5D Mark III | User manual | Canon EOS 5D Mark III User manual

Canon EOS 5D Mark III User manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ EOS 5D Mark III‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺘﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﺫﺍ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،DIGIC 5+‬ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺫﺍ ‪ ٦١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ )‪.(Full HD‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ "ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" )ﺹ ‪ ،٣٨٣‬ﻭ‪(٣٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭ"ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ" )ﺹ ‪ ،١٤‬ﻭ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،"CF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪CompactFlash‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ "SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ .SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ"‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪Eg‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E6/LC-E6E‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS5DMKIII‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E6E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LC-E6E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )‪ (Eyecup Eg‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .PDF‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪٣٩٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<9‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻭ‪8‬‬
‫ﻭ‪7‬‬
‫ﻭ‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ a‬ﺃﻭ ‪.F‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <1‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،٣٤‬ﻭ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (USM‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (IS‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪٢٨٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٣٣٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٣٩٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪٣ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪١٢ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪١٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٦ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٣٠ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪٣١ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٤ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪٣٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪٣٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣٩ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪٤٢ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٤٣ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٩ ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٥١ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪٥٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٥٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٥ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪٥٦ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪٥٩ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪٦١ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( ‪٦٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪٦٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٧٠ ......................................................(AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٧٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٧٥ ................................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٧٨ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ( ‪٨٥ ..............‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٩٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٠٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١١٠..................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪١١١....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١١٢..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪١١٣.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٦...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٩.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٢٤.......................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٢٩.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٣٢.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٣٥........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪١٣٧.......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪١٣٨...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪١٣٩................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪١٤٠........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٤٢............................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪١٤٣.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪١٤٦................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ‪١٤٧...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪١٥٠.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪١٥٢.....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٥٤.................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٥٦.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪١٥٨................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪١٦٠.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪١٦٢.........................................................‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٦٤..................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪١٦٥.............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪١٦٦...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٦٧............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٦٩......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪١٧٠.......................................................(AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٧١.................................................................. (AE‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪١٧٢.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪١٧٣................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪١٧٧.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٨٤.....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪١٨٥.......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٨٥..................................................................‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٨٦........................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪١٨٨.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٩١........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٩٨............................................................. LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢٠٢..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٠٣.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٢٠٧...........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪٢١٤...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢١٨................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٢١٨...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٢١٩.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٢٢٠......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٢٢٣............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪٢٢٨............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢٣٠..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢٣١............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٢٣٤...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ ‪٢٣٦.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٣٧...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٣٩.............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٤٤.................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٤٦..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ I H‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٤٩.............................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪٢٥١.................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ(‪٢٥٣...........................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٥٤..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪٢٥٥....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٥٧..................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢٥٩.............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٦١.................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢٦٣.......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٦٥.................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪٢٦٨.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٧٢..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٧٤....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٧٧....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٧٩.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٧٩..................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٨٠................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٨١‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٨٢........................................‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪٢٨٧....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪٢٨٩‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٩٠.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪٢٩١..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٩٣.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٩٦.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٩٨.........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٣٠٣..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪٣٠٥......................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪٣٠٨......................‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪٣٠٩...........................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣١٤................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣١٥......................................................................‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn1: Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٣١٥.........................‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn2: Disp./Operation‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٣١٨..............‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn3: Others‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ‪٣٢٠.......................................‬‬
‫‪) Custom Controls :82‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ‪٣٢١..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٣٣١.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣٣٢.........................................................‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٣٣٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٣٣٦.............................................................................. B‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٣٣٨...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪٣٤٢..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٣٤٣.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪٣٤٤.......................................................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٣٤٦.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٣٤٨......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٣٥٦.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٣٥٨................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٣٧١......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٣٧٢..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣٨٣...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٣٩٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٩٤...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٣٩٧..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٤٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ Í (HDR‬ﺹ ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ Í (AEB‬ﺹ ‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٨٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٨٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٩٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٠٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٠٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(C.Fn‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣١٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٢١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٣١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٩٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٩١‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴًﺎ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﺨﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﻩ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮّﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴًﺎ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <f‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <x‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٧/١٦٧‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨/٧٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢ ،٧٠‬‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪— ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨/١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٨٤‬ﻭ‪(٢٩٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٢٢ ،٢١‬‬
‫>‪<p‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٢٦ ،١٩٩ ،٧٠ ،٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪،٢٢٥ ،٢٠٠ ،٦١ ،٦٠‬‬
‫‪(٣٣٦ ،٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪Terminal cover‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٤٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٩‬‬
‫>‪ <q/C‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠٩ ،٢٩٦/٢٧١‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦٨‬‬
‫>‪ <F‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) (N3‬ﺹ ‪(١٨٥‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫>‪<b/m‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻥ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ(‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪،١٢٩‬‬
‫‪( ٣٠١/٢٥٣/١٧٧ ،١٧٣‬‬
‫>‪ <A/k‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٧/١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٨ ،١٩٨‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫>‪<c‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٧٣ ،٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٥١/٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٤٤‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٧٧‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٢٧٩‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٢٧٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SD‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪([ -- -- -- ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)‪([ -- -- -- ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(1.2/2/1‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CLn‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Full‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ (Err‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪ 4 L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫>‪ <w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ W‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ U‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺠﻬّﺰ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫>‪ <N‬ﻣ ِّ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫>‪ <2‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٤‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬
‫>‪ <P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <J‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫>‪ <f‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫>‪ <J‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪١‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪) ٣‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 41‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪ 61‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١٨‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪([ -- -- --] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪([ -- -- -- ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(1.2/2/1‬‬
‫>‪ <z‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪/ (١٧١‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪/ (١٨٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٥‬‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٤‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٢‬‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٦‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٢‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪: A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(d/s/f/a/F‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،w‬ﻭ‪ ،x‬ﻭ‪ y‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪4L‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺹ ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٧٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٤ ،١١١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٪٤٩ - ٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٪٧٤ - ٥٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪ ٪٧٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫< ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻭﻗﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٣٨‬ﻭﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٣٨‬ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٪٩٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪ (٢٩‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٨ ،١١٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺮﺯ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺹ ‪،(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ II‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) UHS‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.UHS SDHC/SDXC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC/SDXC‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ DMA (UDMA‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ UDMA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z1:Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٤٨‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Recording ...‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ،(...‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪) ٠٠٠١‬ﺹ ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٣‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺹ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺎ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪[52: Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ٍ [Recording ...‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ )‪ (b‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )‪١٠ - ١٩ ٢٠ - ٤٩ ٥٠ - ٦٩ ٧٠ - ١٠٠ (٪‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪١-٩‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٩٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٨٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪BG-E11‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ :LP-E6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪) AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.١٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ]‪) [53: Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E11‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪]) .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.([m/x‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻔﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Date/Time‬‬
‫‪) [Zone‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[52‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Date/Time/Zone‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <0‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.(<s‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Time zone‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Y‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Y‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٥٢-٥١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LanguageK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[52‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[LanguageK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EF‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ‪ EW-83H‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻬﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ،(IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ Image Stabilizer‬ﺃﻱ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ "ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ"‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ً <1‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺻﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) Eg‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٦٨‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.(0) LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪<n‬‬
‫>‪ ،<m> <o‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ )‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪<n‬‬
‫>‪ ،<m> <o‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ )‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(٢٣٦‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z5: Silent Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enableh‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ >‪ <9‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ )ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ]‪[31: Erase images‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ]‪) [51: Format card‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [82: Multi function lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( )ﺹ ‪ (٣١٩‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <L‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪،(٤٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪/(9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<U‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ* )ﺹ ‪(١٧١‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ* )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢١‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* )ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪AEB‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٠ ،١٦٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪<0> Ð‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫< )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‬
‫ﺹ ‪ (٣٢١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<M‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <M‬ﻭ>‪ <Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ >‪.<5> <6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ :z‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z4‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) z‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪) [31: Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ]‪) [51: Format card‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٣٤٨‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format card‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Format card‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [f‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭ]‪ [g‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[g‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎﻕ ]‪) [Low level format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٧١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ SD‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .FAT‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .exFAT‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.exFAT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Microsoft‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Image review‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪١٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪٢٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪١٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪١٢٨٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪*٦ - ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪/١‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) USM‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻜﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫* ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨٩‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫‪ ١٠) e‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٢:٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪zD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪m‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(IPB‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ WFT‬ﻭ‪ ،GPS‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [VF grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪VF grid‬‬
‫‪) [display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٢١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٩ ،٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪[53: z button display options‬‬
‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪.°١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ .(٢٢٥ ،٢٠٠‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [zHelp‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻞء ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) [Case 2] [21‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪(2‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) [AF-assist beam firing] [23‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) [Multi function lock] [82‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
٦٢
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ً .(٣٤٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.d/s/f/F‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺃﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<e‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <A‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪،<d/s/f/a‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ >‪ ،<D‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ >‪.<e‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.(<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ >‪ ،<e‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ .(<o‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻣﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺹ ‪) (١٨٨‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.١٩٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ > < ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "AI Focus AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Focus‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ :X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ :9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ >‪ <e‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z1: Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪٦١‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﻓﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Servo‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫‪ ٦١‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ" ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٧٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ (‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ >‪) <w‬ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫>‪ <w‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [24: Select AF area selec. mode‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [24: AF area selection method‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ →Main Dial‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪) <6‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.AI Servo AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ .<9‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٧٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫‪) SEL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‪) SEL AF/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [25: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪) [Stops at AF area edges‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺃﻭ ] ‪) [Continuous‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٢‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ >‪<O‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﺺ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺣﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ >‪) <w‬ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻊ >‪ <S‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪.<S‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ >‪ <w‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ (‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (Al Servo‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪One-Shot AF‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ( )ﺹ ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻌﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<S‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٧٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ >‪ <S‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(٧٤‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [24: Orientation linked AF point‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫[ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Select separate AF points‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [24: Selectable AF point‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٧٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ٍ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ / /‬ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ‪ "EF1.4x‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ‪ "EF2x‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ‪.I/II/III‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ،EOS 5D Mark III‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌًﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.8 II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 1.8L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪١٫٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪١٫٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ + IS‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪١٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٠‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪١٫٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٧‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪*٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢.٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪*٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌًﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪*٣٫٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪Compact Macro‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪*II‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪Macro‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ‪ Fisheye‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ Macro‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٧‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ + II‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1.4x‬ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪١٫٤x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ + II‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ + 1.4x‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪*٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫* ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌًﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٨‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫـ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٢٫٥‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ + Compact Macro‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪LIFE SIZE‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2x‬ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪Macro‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2x‬ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٨‬ﻭ‪ ٧٦‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪III‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪2x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2x‬ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.4x‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1.4x‬ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪III‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪III‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪4.5A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪III‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪IV‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪V‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٨٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻭ‪ ٥٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٥٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٧٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪III‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪PZ‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪Macro‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪+ Macro‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ‪EF1.4x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﻠﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ .٥٫٦‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ f‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Al Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ .٦‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[21‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٢‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﺺ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻋﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮﺍﺓ ﺳﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﻟﺠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﻟﺠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺒﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[0] :‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻷﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Case 2‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ (٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Case 6‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻼﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) Locked on‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ(‪[-1 :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[0] :‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Tracking sensitivity‬‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Locked on: -2‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳُﻤﱠﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) Responsive‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ(‪[+1 :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[+1] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[0] :‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Tracking‬‬
‫‪) [sensitivity‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [+2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[+1] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[0] :‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﺄ ًﺓ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Accel./decel. tracking‬‬
‫)ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [+2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :٥‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[+1] :‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﻴﺒﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻓ ًﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪AF pt‬‬
‫‪) [auto switching‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [+2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :٦‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪[0] :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‪[+1] :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪[+1] :‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻓ ًﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﺄ ًﺓ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Accel./decel. tracking‬‬
‫)ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [+2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [AF pt auto switching‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [+2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Locked on‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ(‪) Locked on / -2 :‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ(‪[-1 :‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.-١‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Responsive‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ(‪) Responsive / +2 :‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ(‪[+1 :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ +٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.+١‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ]‪) [Tracking sensitivity‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ( ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ]‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) [tracking sensitivity‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ EOS-1D Mark III/IV‬ﻭ‪ EOS-1Ds Mark III‬ﻭ‪.EOS 7D‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[+2 / +1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ‪/‬ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ +٢‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.+١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[+2 / +1‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ +٢‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.+١‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )‪ .١‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<c‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‪ [C‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<c‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،١‬ﻭ‪ ،٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ .(٣٣١‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ]‪[22‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ ،[25‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪22: AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪ :23‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٠‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٢‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) Disable :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) IR‬ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‪) IR AF assist beam only :‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ]‪[AF-assist beam firing‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪Continue focus search :‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪Stop focus search :‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪[Stop focus search‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Selectable AF point‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪s ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦١) 61 points :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٦١‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Only cross-type AF points :‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪ ١٥) 15 points :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩) 9 points :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺡ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٤ ،٨٣‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪ ٦١) [61 points‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ (‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ .<X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Manual select.:Spot AF :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺿﻴﻖ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Manual selection:1 pt AF :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Selectable AF point‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Expand AF area :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Expand AF area:Surround :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪) Manual select.:Zone AF :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto selection :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) 61 pt AF :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪ <X‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Manual selection:1 pt AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺡ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٤‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Manual‬‬
‫‪) [select.:Spot AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ( ﻭ]‪Manual selection:1‬‬
‫‪) [pt AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫← ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪M-Fn‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫← ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪→ Main Dial‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫[ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Same for both vert/horiz :‬ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ٍ‬
‫‪) Select separate AF points :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ .١‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ]‪Same‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) [for both vert/horiz‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.(AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) Stops at AF area edges :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Continuous :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭ‪.٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Selected (constant) :‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ All (constant) :‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Selected (pre-AF, focused) :‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،١‬ﻭ‪ ،٢‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) Selected (focused) :‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) Disable display :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭ‪ ،٣‬ﻭ‪ ،٤‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ])‪) [Selected (pre-AF, focused‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(( ﺃﻭ ])‪) [Selected (focused‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ((‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) Auto :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) Disable :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺳﺘﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٠٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AF Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[25‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪AF‬‬
‫‪) [Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪All by same‬‬
‫‪) [amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[All by same amount‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺮﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ " ‪ "–:‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ " ‪ "+:‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪All by same‬‬
‫‪) [amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ " ‪ ."+:‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ " ‪. "–:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪ (W‬ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪.(T‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Adjust by lens‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪ ."0000000000‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ‬
‫" * " ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " * " ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ُﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ " * "‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Adjust by lens‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪ (W‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪ .(T‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻳﺘﺮﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ " ‪ "–:‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ " ‪ "+:‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪.(T‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Adjust by lens‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ " ‪ ."+:‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ " ‪."–:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻷﺣﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [ Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ( ﻭ]‪) [Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٦‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ]‪) [Disable‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.73‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺤﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ >‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٧‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪) [u Live mode]/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٢١١‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <4L‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫‪ : u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ : i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪ : M‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ : k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.١٨٦‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<M‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ*‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑـ ‪ ١/٥٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : k‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٨٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ >‪ <k‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Record func+card/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ +‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Record‬‬
‫‪) [func+card/folder sel.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ +‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Record func.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪) [Record/play‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto switch card‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١١٩‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‪ CF‬ﻭ‪ SD‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 73‬ﻭ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﻭ‪ ،41‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‪ CF‬ﻭ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ ‪ CF‬ﻭ‪ً .SD‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Card* full‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto switch card‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫‪) [switch card‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto switch card‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Record/play‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Record/play‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : g‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Rec. to multiple‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Playback‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Playback‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪ : g‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .c ،b ،8a ،7a ،84 ،74 ،83 ،73 :JPEG‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) 61 ،41 ،1 :RAW‬ﺹ ‪.(١٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Standard / Auto‬‬
‫‪switch card / Rec. to‬‬
‫‪) [multiple‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ /‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Rec. separately‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪:‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Image quality‬‬
‫)ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪**M‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ( **** ‪ "**** x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]***[‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪[51: Record func+card/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Rec.‬‬
‫‪) [separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<g‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪1 + 73‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪61 + 74‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]–[ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.73‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٩٩٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٩٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪٧٫٠‬‬
‫‪١٠١٠‬‬
‫‪(١٦٢٧٠) ٦٥‬‬
‫‪٣٫٧‬‬
‫‪١٩٣٠‬‬
‫‪(٣٠٩٩٠) ١٩٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٫٨‬‬
‫‪١٨٦٠‬‬
‫‪(٢٩٨٠٠) ١٨٦٠‬‬
‫‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫‪٣٤٣٠‬‬
‫‪(٥٥٠٠٠) ٣٤٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٫٥‬‬
‫‪٢٨١٠‬‬
‫‪(٤٥١٤٠) ٢٨١٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٣‬‬
‫‪٥٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪(٨٣٩٨٠) ٥٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٤‬‬
‫‪٥٠٣٠‬‬
‫‪(٨٠٥٢٠) ٥٠٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫—‬
‫‪٠٫٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٥٢٠‬‬
‫‪(٣١٢٤٢٠) ١٩٥٢٠‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٢٧٫١‬‬
‫‪٢٦٠‬‬
‫‪(١٨) ١٣‬‬
‫‪41 RAW‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪١٩٫١‬‬
‫‪٣٧٠‬‬
‫‪(١١) ١٠‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪١٥٫١‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠‬‬
‫‪(١٥) ١٢‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪7a JPEG‬‬
‫‪8a‬‬
‫‪*b‬‬
‫‪*c‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪73 JPEG‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٧٫٠+٢٧٫١‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫‪(٧) ٧‬‬
‫‪ A3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٧٫٠+١٩٫١‬‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬‬
‫‪(٧) ٧‬‬
‫‪٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪(٧) ٧‬‬
‫‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫*‪ b :١‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ c :٢‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٫٠+١٥٫١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ b‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪) 7‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ Ultra DMA (UDMA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،٧‬ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ JPG‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(CR2‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ (RAW) 1 :‬ﻭ‪ RAW) 41‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ‪61‬‬
‫)‪ RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪) 7‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ( ﻭ‪) 8‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ‪) 3‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﻭ‪) 4‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ‪) 6‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪1 :‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ ‪.61‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪) [31: RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) (RAW‬ﺹ ‪ (٢٨٢‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪41‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٤‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪One-touch‬‬
‫‪) [image quality setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٢١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Record func+card/folder sel.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪."99‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "99‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"buSY‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢١‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .UDMA CF‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٢١‬ﻭ‪.٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ISO 100 -‬‬
‫‪ 25600‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫"‪ "A‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٤٠٠ - ١٠٠ ،L‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫‪١٦٠٠ - ٤٠٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫‪H2 ،H1 ،٢٥٦٠٠ - ١٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺳﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [z3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ (ISO 50) "L‬ﻭ‪ ISO 100/125/160‬ﻭ"‪"H1‬‬
‫)‪ (ISO 51200‬ﻭ"‪) (ISO 102400) "H2‬ﺹ ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ‪) H1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ (ISO 51200‬ﻭ‪) H2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ (102400‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum: 25600‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ (٢٥٦٠٠ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،ISO 16000/20000/25600‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ISO12800‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ 1. L (50‬ﺃﻭ )‪ ،H2 (102400)/2. H1 (51200‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1. ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 2. H (25600‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z2: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ )‪ ISO 50 (L‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪) ISO 102400 (H2‬ﺹ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ )‪ L‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪(H2‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣١٨‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫‪d/s/f/a‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪*ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪* * *ISO 400‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣ ٢ ١‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ >‪ <A‬ﻭ>‪ ،<d‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 400 - 1600‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ )‪ L (ISO 50‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،H1 (ISO 51200‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪.H2 (ISO 102400‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(ISO‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ،100 - 12800‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪ ISO 200 - 25600‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٣١٧‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪ <f‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<b‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [z3: Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Auto D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Portrait Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Landscape R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Neutral S‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Faithful U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪) Monochrome V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Monochrome‬‬
‫)ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٨‬‬
‫‪) User Def. 1-3 W‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(١٣٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.١٣٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<b‬‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :٧+‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪ V‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ : N‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Ye‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ : Or‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ : R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ : G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪[User Def. 1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<b‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]* ‪[User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٣٤-١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺹ ‪،(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٦‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠ - ٣٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٥٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٣٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﻀﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [z2: White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫‪O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Custom White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪.<O‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪ .<O‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪White‬‬
‫‪) [Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ >‪ <P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB Shift/‬‬
‫‪) [Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪G1 ،A2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Shift‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫" )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫" " ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Bracket‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٦‬‬
‫"ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻤُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫‪) [Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [z3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٧‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) HDR‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Disable during man expo‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [High ISO speed NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪High ISO‬‬
‫‪) [speed NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺌﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Long exp. noise reduction‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Long exp.‬‬
‫‪) [noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ً‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ "‪ "١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Highlight‬‬
‫‪) [tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٢‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Highlight tone priority‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪ISO 200 -) ISO 200 - 25600‬‬
‫‪ 12800‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Lens aberration correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Lens‬‬
‫‪) [aberration correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪) [illumin.‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺹ ‪.١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Correction data available‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Chromatic‬‬
‫‪) [aberration‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪) Utility‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Record func+card/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Record‬‬
‫‪) [func+card/folder sel.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ "‪ "100EOS5D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ .(٩٩٩٩ - ٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٥٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ ."100ABC_D‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ "100ABC_D" ،‬ﻭ"‪ ،("100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ‪BE3B0001.JPG‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ "‪) "User setting1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،(١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ "‪) "User setting2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،(٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File name‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File name‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Change User setting‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Change User‬‬
‫*‪) [setting‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ*(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [File name‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ "*** )ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ( ‪ +‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ "*** ‪ +‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫"‪41 ،84 ،74 = "***M‬‬
‫"‪1 ،83 ،73 = "***L‬‬
‫"‪b = "***T‬‬
‫"‪61 ،8a ،7a = "***S‬‬
‫"‪c = "***U‬‬
‫ﻋﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻫﻮ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ "‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ "‪ ".MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ‪BE3B0001.JPG‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،(g ← f‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪Card-A (f‬‬
‫)‪Card-B (g‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪0052‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-A‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪0052‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،(g ← f‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪Card-A (f‬‬
‫)‪Card-B (g‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-A‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪0051‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠٠٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Enter author’s‬‬
‫‪) [name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Enter‬‬
‫‪) [copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6/5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٣‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Display copyright info.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]‪[Author‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﻭ]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]‪) [Author‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﻭ]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٤‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ICC‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪،d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ ‪.٣٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* >‪ <d‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ‪) ND‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﺹ ‪.(٣٤٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ١/٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ "‪ "8000‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "125‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ""‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(f/5.6 :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(f/32 :‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﺿﻴﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <h‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO) ISO Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪) [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Disable during man expo‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <a‬ﺹ ‪.(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO) ISO Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٢٣ ،٢٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫‪:q‬‬
‫‪:w‬‬
‫‪:r‬‬
‫‪:e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪٦٫٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪١٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ ،<r‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٨‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .d/s/f‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪[z2: Expo.comp./AEB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )‪ (0‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫"‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ("‪ * .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo.comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo.‬‬
‫‪) [comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ >‪ ،<5‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ >‪ <A‬ﻭ>‪ <h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <i‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫‪wre‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪) RS-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ً‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ( ﺑﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<b‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[w‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Adjust dyn range‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable HDR‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Effect‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺒﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Art standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻨﻲ( ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺒﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍ ًء‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Continuous HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Every‬‬
‫‪) [shot‬ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Every shot‬ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Disable‬‬
‫‪) [HDR‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [HDR img only‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪.(ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٧‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٩١‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ s‬ﻭ‪ ،a‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻭﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Auto Image Align‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺌﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪ .73‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[z3: HDR Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٩٧‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[P‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<b‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Multiple exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [On:ContShtng‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) On: Func/Ctrl‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On: ContShtng‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:ContShtng‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺼﺎﻋ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Multi-expos ctrl‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪No. of‬‬
‫‪) [exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺘﺎ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :١-‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :١٫٥-‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻭ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪/‬ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﺎﻣﺔ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﺎﻣﺔ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[All images‬‬
‫)ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Result only‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Continue Mult-exp‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Continuously‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Continuously‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<P‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻭ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٩‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:ContShtng‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ <A> <w/x/y‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:Func/ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [z3: Multiple exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻠﻴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 41/61‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select image for multi. expo.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select image for multi. expo.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪No. of‬‬
‫‪) [exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻫﻮ ‪،٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Deselect img‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:Func/ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪) .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:ContShtng‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<L‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Save source imgs: All images‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Save source imgs: Result only‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؟‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،61‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪41/61‬‬
‫‪41/61‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫‪41/61+JPEG‬‬
‫‪41/61+JPEG‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Select image for multi. expo.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٨١‬ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ؟‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On:Func/Ctrl‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٩٧‬ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪) [z4: Aspect ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[٢:٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ؟‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [52: Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ .(١٨٦‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ EOS‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪N3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ .(٣٥٦‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﻭ‪.RC-5‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<k‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪) EOS‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻴﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٩٦-١٩١‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ A-TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ١/٢٠٠ Canon‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻠﻮﻟﺐ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻗﻄﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [z4: Silent LV shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪ .(٢٠٦‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External Speedlite control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [E-TTL II meter.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪(E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﺺ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(f‬‬
‫‪) Auto :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/200-1/60 sec. auto :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠-١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٢٠٠) 1/200 sec. (fixed) :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[1/200-1/60 sec. auto‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ .(١/٦٠-١/٢٠٠‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ١/٦٠-١/٢٠٠) [1/200-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ ١/٦٠-١/٢٠٠) [1/200-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ])‪[1/200 sec. (fixed‬‬
‫)‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ((‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [E-TTL II flash metering‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Flash output level‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪First-curtain‬‬
‫‪) [synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Second-curtain synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [High-speed synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪) FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Second-curtain‬‬
‫‪) [synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear flash settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) [Flash firing] :‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II meter.‬ﻭ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [exposure compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪Flash function‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Shutter synchronization‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ (Speedlite‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪) [C.Fn-00: Distance indicator display‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٠٠‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪[Flash metering mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [TTL‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ (P.Fn) Speedlite‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(JPEG 73‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪ ،<d/s/f/a/F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪.[z2‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ٣٠ .‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٢١٦-٢١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [52: Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪52: Auto‬‬
‫‪) [power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٧١ ،٢٦٨‬‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ‪) : d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫• ‪ : c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (HDR‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Expo. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪ .(٦٠‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [uLive mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ ،<g‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻚ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛ ﱠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [E×po. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ((‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪i / y / f / R / B / S / A‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <S‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<b‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،f‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z4‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .٢٠٦-٢٠٣‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪.[z2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (٢٠٧‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (٢٠٨‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ]‪ [l 3×3‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[m 4×6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [3+diag n×3‬ﻗﻄﺮﻱ‪ ،(٣×٣+‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [4:3‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[1:1‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.[1:1] [16:9] [4:3] :‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‪.[3:2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [83: Add cropping information‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) .3:2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪1:1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪٣٨٤٠×٥٧٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٨٤٠×٥١٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٩٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٢٤٠×٥٧٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٨٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٨٤٠×٣٨٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٤٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦٠×٣٨٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٩٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢٥٦٠×٣٤٠٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢١٦٠×٣٨٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٥٦٠×٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٦٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪٢٦٤٠×٣٩٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٠٫٤٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٦٤٠×٣٥٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٩٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢٢٢٨×٣٩٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٦٤٠×٢٦٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٦٢٤×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٦٢٠×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٢٨٠×١٦٩٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٢٨٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٤٠٠×٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠٫٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،١:١‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [82: LV shooting area display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )‪(g‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )‪(E‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪) .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪) Silent LV shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪N‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ ،<o‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )‪(TS-E‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Silent LV‬‬
‫‪) [shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪،(١٨٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 3.5L‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،II‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Mode 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [z3: Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪53: Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [54: Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [54: Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻭ]‪u Live‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٢٠٨‬ﻭ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪،<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪.[z2‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪d :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ > < ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪c :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<AF‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(٢٠٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<9‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪،LED‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ،٢٫٨‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪،٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،Compact Macro‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،Macro‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪) ٢٫٨‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺲ(‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM ،III‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ،٥٫٦‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٫٦‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Quick Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪f :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪،(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ" ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ٦١‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ"‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ .<9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<9‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ >‪ <6‬ﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) .(AF‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻸ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء>‪ <s‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء>‪<E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ >‪ .<s‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫>‪ .<E‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ >‪ <s‬ﻭ>‪ً <E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ TS-E‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [52: LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<k‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٣١‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫‪IPB‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫‪-I) ALL-I‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <d‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <d‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<F‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(٢١٤-٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪"o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ >‪ ،<s‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ >‪.<9‬‬
‫• ‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ : 654‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪87‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ >‪ ،<f‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪.ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪ s‬ﻭ‪ f‬ﻭ‪F‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪.ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z2: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) (ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٢٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range] [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [25600/H‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،F‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ِ .(ISO 25600‬‬
‫]‪ ،[25600‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ‪.ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٦‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ‪.ISO 200 - 12800‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z2: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭ]‪[Auto ISO range‬‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٨ ،١٢٧‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[ISO speed range‬‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [L(50‬ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪ [H1(51200‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ [H2(102400‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ISO 100‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،ISO 25600) H‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ .(s‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO 51200/102400‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٧١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<S‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪(<S‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪) <5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪.(<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٢٥‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ُ ) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،F‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ >‪.<9‬‬
‫• ‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ : 654‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪87‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪ ،(A‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪.ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ISO 100 - 12800‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z2: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [ISO speed range] [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ ،[25600/H‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪H‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪،[25600‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ِ .(25600‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ‪.ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٦‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺿﻤﻦ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.((ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z2: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭ]‪[Auto ISO range‬‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٨ ،١٢٧‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ،ISO 16000/20000/25600‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪.([H‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [L(50‬ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [H1(51200‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ [H2(102400‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ )‪ .H (ISO 25600‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO 51200/102400‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO) ISO Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٢٥ ،٢٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ‪) Live mode :d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫• ‪ : c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :L‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ :K‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ*‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫* ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٦٨‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٥‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [51: Record func+card/folder sel.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ >‪ CF <f‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ >‪ .SD <g‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [Playback‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤١‬ﻭ‪.٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢١٥‬ﻭ‪.٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z4‬ﻭ]‪) [z5‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٣٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<A‬ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z2‬ﻭ]‪.[z3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.([A‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<p‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z5: Movie shoot. btn‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] ‪ ،[V/‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<k‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫)ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١١٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto switch card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [Playback‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [z1: Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [1920x1080‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[1280x720‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .16:9‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ]‪ ،[640x480‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻫﻲ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪*ISO‬‬
‫• >‪١٢٨٠٠ - ١٠٠ :<A/d/s/f/F‬‬
‫• >‪ :<a‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ •‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫>‪ :<A/d/F‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <s‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <f‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <a‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ‪.ISO 200‬‬
‫‪٢٢٨‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AEB‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z5: Movie shoot. btn‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ] ‪ ،[V/‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪f / R / B / i / S / A‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <S‬ﺃﻭ >‪<b‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،f‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٢٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪ <q> :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭ>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ>‪ <w‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ >ﻭ‪ <P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Sound‬‬
‫‪) [recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪(.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [z4: Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [53: Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫]‪.[z2‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪ : A [1920x1080‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ .(Full HD‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ .(HD‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪B [1280x720‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫]‪C [640x480‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ : 6/8‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪) NTSC‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪ : 5/7‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ‪) PAL‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪XIPB‬‬
‫‪-I) WALL-I‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،ALL-I‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،IPB‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪X 654‬‬
‫‪W 654‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٨٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪65 C‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤١‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto switch card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) ١٠٨٠‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪z4: Sound‬‬
‫‪) [recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪،<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[z2‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rec. level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ )‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ١٢-) "12‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ "‪ ،"0‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٩‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪ ،<A‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫]‪) [On/Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ([ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<c‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) L‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭ‪) R‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ L‬ﻭ‪.R‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z5: Silent Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable h‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ >‪ <h‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z5: Silent Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable h‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ >‪ <h‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[z3‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪d/F‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪f s‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z5: Silent Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable h‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ >‪ ،<h‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<h‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ >‪ .<h‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <h‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ]‪[Rec. level‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[z5: Time code‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[z3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Rec run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Free run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual input setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [Manual input setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭ]‪Set to camera‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.00:00:00:00‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫]‪) [Set to camera time‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"ﺍﻷﻃﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.00‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Free run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٣٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Movie rec count‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movie play count‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪) [z5 (movie): Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟـ ]‪[x3: Movie play count‬‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺍﻷﻃﺮ" ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٢٩٫٩٧) 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥٩٫٩٤) 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٣٫٩٧٦) 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[z4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<k‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[z4‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [z5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [z2‬ﻭ]‪.[z3‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .٢١٣-٢٠٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3x3l‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[6x4m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [3x3+diag n‬ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ‪ ،(٣×٣+‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Movie recording size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٣١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪) Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ٢٣٤‬ﻭ‪.٢٣٥‬‬
‫‪٢٣٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪) Silent LV shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠٦‬‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[z5‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٣٧‬ﻭ‪.٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable h‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ >‪ <h‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ] ‪ ،[V/‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪) RS-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺒﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٨٥‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ] ‪ ،[V/‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء >‪ <s‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء >‪<E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ >‪ .<s‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ >‪ .<E‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ >‪ <s‬ﻭ>‪<E‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫‪٢٤١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ( ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٦٨‬ﻭ‪ (٢٧١‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٢‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٥٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [33: Playback grid‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [3x3l‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[6x4m‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [3x3+diag n‬ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ‪.(٣×٣+‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٥‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ >‪<P‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫* ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<0‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <w‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <P‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<G‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: AF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٧‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[33: Histogram disp‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٤٨‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫]ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] ‪ [6u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ ،[6u‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Image jump‬‬
‫‪) [w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Display images one by one :d‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪) Jump 10 images :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Jump 100 images :f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ :g‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪) Display by folder :h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫‪) Display movies only :i‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪) Display stills only :j‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻚ(‬
‫‪) Display by image rating :k‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫]‪ [6u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[33‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫])‪) [Magnificatn (apx‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ((‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<u‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٠٧‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<x‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate image‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Rotate image‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠ ← °٢٧٠ ← °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٨٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪51: Auto‬‬
‫‪) [rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪l/m/n/ :‬‬
‫‪ .o/p‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<c‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<c‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪/l/m/n/o/p :‬ﺑﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [53:mbtn function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Rating‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [53:mbtn function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<c‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Rating‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪.[s‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪ [###‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [32: Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [32: Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٣٩٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :K] :‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :b ،‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪ :9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ :R ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪) RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :S ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪) Highlight alert : ،‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪) ،AF point display: ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪) [e: Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٨٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٨٧‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [b Rotate image‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٨‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧١ ،٢٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ (Full HD: 1920x1080‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (HD: 1280x720‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(٢٦٧-٢٦١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٩٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ،ImageBrowser EX‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <1s‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺄﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ''‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Movie play count: Rec time‬‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ((‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Movie play‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬ﺍﻷﻃﺮ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪) [count: Time code‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ((‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٦١‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ٣ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٦٨‬ﻭ‪ (٢٧١‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٢‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪) [U‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[V‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٦٣‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑـ ]‪ ،([X‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٢٦٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪[All images/Movies/Stills‬‬
‫)ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) jAll images‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪kMovies/‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪)[Date/Folder/Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [iDate/nFolder/9Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪ ،<zH‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪) j‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) n‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) z‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Display time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪٢٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪Display‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Loading image...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،(...‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٦٨‬ﻭ‪.٢٧١‬‬
‫‪٢٦٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )‪ (HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٦١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻭ>‪.<q‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ *HDMI CEC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗُﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛ ﱠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ (HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[33‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Ctrl over HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،(HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٦٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Return‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٥٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ً HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،HDMI CEC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<q‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٦١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [53: Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧١‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [31: Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[All images on card‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Unprotect all‬‬
‫‪) [images in folder‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Unprotect all images on card‬‬
‫)ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<c‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <c‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [53: mbtn function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<c‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<c‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٥٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٧٨‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪٢٧٣‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image copy‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Image‬‬
‫‪) [copy‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[51: Record func+card/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Record/play‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)]‪) ([Playback‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٤‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<c‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<c‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٥‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ]‪x1: Image‬‬
‫‪) [copy‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Sel.n‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪) [Skip image and continue] :‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ( ]‪Replace‬‬
‫‪) [existing image‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ]‪) [Cancel copy‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫• ]‪) [Skip image and continue‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [Replace existing image‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ )ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٣٠٥‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٦‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [83: Default Erase option‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[[Erase] selected‬‬
‫)]ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ[ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.(٣٢٠.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪:31‬‬
‫‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [51: Record func+card/folder sel.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪+‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Record/play‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )]‪) ([Playback‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪LCD‬‬
‫‪) [brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Manual‬‬
‫)ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) OnzD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(z D‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(D‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) JPEG‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪.<C‬‬
‫‪٢٨١‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital‬‬
‫‪) Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٤‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ، [31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪RAW image‬‬
‫‪) [processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،(RAW‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫‪) RAW‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨٦-٢٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ"‬
‫ﻭ"ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ" ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [W‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻓﻲ ]‪) [RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .(RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)]‪ ([4:3] [16:9] [1:1‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٣‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ .١/٣‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[P‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]****‪ ،[****M ****x‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ .٣:٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٨٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨٤‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ً .Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﻔﺎءًﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Distortion correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ( ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٧‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٩١‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٥‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٤‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪٢٨٦‬‬
‫‪) S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ .3/4/a/b‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ JPEG c‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٧‬‬
‫‪) S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]****‪ ،[**M ****x‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٣:٢‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٢٨٨‬‬
‫‪٣:٢‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦٠×٣٨٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٩٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪*٢٥٦٠×٣٤٠٨‬‬
‫‪٢١٦٠×٣٨٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١:١‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦٠×٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٦٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٦٢٤×٢٨٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٢٨٠×١٦٩٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٢٨٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٤٠٠×٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻟﻨﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٩‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ ً‬
‫ُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢٩٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٤‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٠٫٧‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.٢٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪(٣٩٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "CLn‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻛﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٩٤‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٠٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪wPictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Bubble Jet Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪.(HDR‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٩٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Borderedc‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ*‪ ١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠) 20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٣٥) 35-upp‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣُﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢*Letter‬‬
‫• ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ*‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪) "(DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٠٥‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) "DPOF‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻼ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٢٩٩‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪EVIVID‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENR‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0B/W‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0Cool tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0Warm tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪)zNatural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬
‫‪zNatural‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪)M‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EDefault‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،H2 ISO‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻫﻮ ‪.١‬‬
‫)ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ (.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٠٣‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [54: Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠١‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،٣٠٠‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٢٥٥‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٢‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٣‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Continue‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪٣٠٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All image‬ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٦‬‬
‫‪٣٠٦‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ >‪<X‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Mark all in folder‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear all in‬‬
‫‪) [folder‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Clear all on card‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ "‪"Byn‬‬
‫)ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ "‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪".‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٧‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٢٩٦‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠٤‬‬
‫‪٣٠٨‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [My Pictures‬ﺻﻮﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍ